CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

SBI CLERK MOCK TEST MATHS BY ARUNSIR

DIRECTION (1-5) what approximate value should come in place of the question

mark () in the following questions (You are not expected to calculate the exact

value)

निरदश (1-5) निमननिखित परशनो म परशवाचक नचनह () क सथाि पर कया अिमानित माि हनिा

चानहए (आपकन सटीक माि की गणिा करि की आवशयकता िही ो ह)

1

25675 of 1321012 + 640328 of 4001 =

a 2904

b 3016

c 3126

d 3254

e 3348

Sol

1321 times 026 + 064 times 4001

= 29041 = 2904

2

[(729)12 + (00019)12] 8 of 134567 =

a 441

b 553

c 455

d 400

e 497

Sol

(27 + 004)8 = 27048 = 338

338 times 134567 = 4548 = 455

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

3

148003 ndash 323987 divide 26991 = 05 times

190

200

272

343

302

Sol

148003 ndash 323987 divide 26991 = 05 times

times 05 asymp 148 ndash 324 divide 27

times 05 = 148 ndash 12

times 05 = 136

= 136 times 2 = 272

4

(2299 + 1701) divide 1998 times 3997 ndash 41998 + 644199 =

682

567

Sol

(2299 + 1701) divide 1998 times 3997 ndash 41998 + 644199 =

23 + 17 times 4 ndash 42 + 644 asymp

2

= 20 times 4 ndash 42 + 644

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

= 80 + 644 ndash 42 = 724 ndash 42 = 682

5

2831994 divide 23998 + 11992 divide 5991 = 2

12

142

78

110

165

Sol

2831994 divide 23998 + 11992 divide 5991 =2

2832 +

122 asymp 2

24 6

118 + 24 = 142asymp 144 =2

= plusmn 12

6

A boat travels in a still water with a speed of 16 kmph while the rate of the

flowing water is 4 kmph Find the distance travelled in upstream by the boat in

20 minutes

एक बनट खसथर पािी म 16 नकमी परनत घोटा की गनत स यातरा करता ह जबनक बहि वाि पािी

की गनत 4 नकमी परनत घोटा हनती ह ऊरधवपरवाह म 20 नमिट म बनट दवारा तय की गयी रदरी जञात

कर

772 km

232 km

672 km

567 km

None of these

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

Sol

Downstream speed = 16 + 4 = 20 kmhr

Upstream Speed = 16 - 4 = 12 kmhr

Distance travelled Upstream = Speed of upstream times time = 12 times 2060 = 4 km

Distance travelled upstream is 4 km

7

The simple interest on a certain sum at 12 per annum for 3 years is Rs 4140

What is the compound interest on the same sum at 8 for two years

3 वरव क निए 12 परनत वरव म एक निनित रानश पर साधारण बयाज 4140 रपय ह समाि

रानश पर रदन वरव क निए 8 पर नकतिा चकरवखि बयाज अनजवत हनगा

182040

191360

201260

1900

None of these

Sol

Let the amount invested be x

Simple interest earned on it = (x times 12 times 3) 100 = 4140

x = (4140 times 100) (12 times 3)

x = 11500

Compound interest earned on it for 2 years at 8 = 11500(1 + 8100)2 ndash

11500

CI = 11500(108)2 ndash 11500

CI = Rs 191360

8

A and B can complete a work in 15 days and 30 days respectively The

efficiency of C is 25 more than that of A The ratio of the efficiency of B to D

is 1 3 If they work together they will complete the work in helliphelliphellip days

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

A और B करमशः 15 नरदि और 30 नरदि म एक काम परा कर सकत ह C की कायवकषमता A

की तििा म 25 अनधक ह B और D की कायवकषमता का अिपात 1 3 ह यनरद व एक साथ

काम करत ह तन व कायव कन helliphelliphellip नरदि म परा कर ग

6017

6013

6019

6011

None of these

Sol

Arsquos one dayrsquos work = 115

Brsquos one dayrsquos work = 130

The efficiency of C = 115 times 125100 = 112

C alone can complete the whole work in = 12 days

Let the efficiency of D be x

1 3 = 130 x

x = 110

D alone can complete the whole work in = 10 days

rArr One day work of (A + B + C + D) = 115 + 130 + 112 + 110 = (4 + 2 + 5

+ 6)60 = 1760

(A + B + C + D) together can complete the whole work in = 6017 days

9

In 24 litres mixture of milk and water the concentration of water is 3333

After adding 2 litres of water in the mixture what will become the

concentration of milk

रदध और पािी क 24 िीटर नमशरण म पािी की साोदरता 3333 ह नमशरण म 2 िीटर पािी

डािि क बारद रदध की साोदरता नकतिी हनगी

2387

5456

6156

4476

None of these

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

Sol

Solution

In the mixture the quantity of water = 13 of 24 = 8 litres

The quantity of milk = 6667 of 24 = 16008 litres

After adding 2 litres of water in the mixture the quantity of water = 8 + 2 =

10 litres

The required concentration of milk = 16008 100(24 + 2) = 6156

10

Two trains are running at opposite direction with the same speed If the length

of each train is 280 meters and they cross each other in 14 seconds The speed

of each train (in msec)

रदन रिगाड़ी समाि गनत स नवपरीत नरदशा म जा रही ह यनरद परतयक रिगाड़ी की िोबाई 280

मीटर ह तथा व एक- रदसर कन 14 सक ड म पार करती ह तन परतयक रिगाड़ी की गनत

(मीटरसक ड) म जञात कीनजय

32

20

34

40

None of these

sol

The length of two trains = 280

They cross each other in 14 seconds

Relative Speed V = (2 times 280)14 = 40 msec

The speed of each train

2V = 40

V = 20 msec

Directions (11-15) In each of these questions a number series is given In each

series only one number is wrong Find out the wrong number

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

निरदश (11-15) इिम स परतयक परश म एक सोखया शरोििा रदी गई ह परतयक शरोििा म कवि

एक सोखया गित ह गित िोबर का पता िगाएो

11

2 11 38 197 1172 8227 65806

a) 11

b) 38

c) 197

d) 1172

e) 8227

Sol

11 = 2 times 3 + 5

38 = 11 times 4 ndash 6

197 = 38 times 5 + 7

1172 ne 197 times 6 ndash 8

1172 is wrong and it should be replaced by 197 times 6 ndash 8 = 1174

12

16 19 21 30 46 71 107

a) 19

b) 21

c) 30

d) 46

e) 71

SOL

107 ndash 71 = 36 = 6 2

71 ndash 46 = 25 = 52

46 ndash 30 = 16 = 42

30 ndash 21 = 9 = 32

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

21 ndash 19 = 2 ne 22

19 should be replaced by 17 for which 21 ndash 17 = 22

13

7 9 16 25 41 68 107 173

a) 107

b) 16

c) 41

d) 68

e) 25

Sol

16 = 9 + 7

25 = 16 + 9

41 = 25 + 16

66=68 ne 41 + 25

14

2 3 6 18 109 1944 209952

a) 3

b) 6

c) 18

d) 109

e) 1944

Sol

2times3=6 3times6=18 6times18=108 18times108=1944hellip

15

1 3 6 11 20 39 70

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

a) 3

b) 39

c) 11

d) 20

e) 6

Sol

1times2+1=3

3times2+0=6

6times2-1=11

11times2-2=20

20times2-3=37hellip

Directions (16-20) In the Bar-chart total Students enrolled in different years

from 1990 to 1994 in two School A and B Based on this Bar chart solve the

following questions-

निरदश (16-20)नरदए गए बार चाटव म वरव 1990 स 1994 तक नवनिन ि वरो म रदन सकि A और

B म रदाखििा िि वाि कि छातरनो का नवतरण नरदया गया ह बार चाटव क आधार पर

निमननिखित परश िनो क उत तर रद-

17

0

60

14

0

27

0

70

24

0

21

0

16

0

24

0

15

0

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

1990 1991 1992 1993 1994

School A School B

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

16

If in the year 1995 there in 30 increase in total number of Students enrolled

then in 1994 by both School then find the total no of Students enrolled in

1995

यनरद वरव 1995 म1994 की तििा म रदनिनो सकि म रदाखििा िि वाि छातरनो की कि सोखया म

30 वखि हनती ह तन 1995 म रदाखििा िि वाि छातरनो की कि सोखया जञात कीनजय

a) 282

b) 296

c) 292

d) 286

e) None of these

Sol

Required Students =130

100times 220 = 286

17

The ratio between total Students of both School in 1991 to total Students in

1994 of both School is-

वरव 1991 म रदनिनो सकि क कि छातरनो का वरव 1994 म रदनिनो सकि क कि छातरनो की सोखया

स अिपात जञात कीनजय

a) 22 27

b) 21 11

c) 11 21

d) 25 13

e) 27 22

Sol

Required Ratio =60+210

70+150=

270

220= minus27 ∶ 22

18

The number of Students of School A in 1991 is what of the no of Student of

School B in 1994

वरव 1991 म सकि A क छातरनो की सोखया वरव 1994 म सकि B क छातरनो की सोखया का नकतिा

परनतशत ह

a) 60

b) 55

c) 58

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

d) 62

e) None of these

Sol

Required =60

150times 100 = 20 times 2

= 40

19

The total number of Student enrolled in School A form 1991 to 1994 together

is what percent more than the total number of Students enrolled in School B

in 1993 and 1994 together (Rounded off to 2 decimal places)

वरव 1991 स 1994 तक सकि A म रदाखििा िि वाि छातरनो की कि सोखया वरव 1993 स

1994 तक सकि B म रदाखििा िि वाि छातरनो की कि सोखया स नकति परनतशत अनधक ह

(रदन रदशमिव अोकनो तक पणाानकत कर )

a) 1051

b) 2051

c) 1551

d) 1751

e) None of these

Sol

Required =(60+140+270+70)minus(240+150)

(240+150)times 100

=470 minus 390

390times 100

=80

390times 100 = 2051

20

Total Student enrolled in School B in 1993 and 1994 together is what percent

more than Students enrolled in School A in 1990 and 1994 together

वरव 1993 और 1994 म कि नमिाकर सकि B म रदाखििा िि वाि छातरनो की कि सोखया

वरव 1990 और 1994 म कि नमिाकर सकि A म रदाखििा िि वाि छातरनो की कि सोखया स

नकतिा परनतशत अनधक ह

a) 60

b) 65

c) 625

d) 615

e) None of these

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

Sol

Required =(240+150)minus(170+70)

(170+70)times 100

=150

240times 100 = 625

Directions (21-25) solve given equations and mark the correction option

निरदश (21-25)िीच नरदए गए समीकरणनो कन हि कीनजए तथा सही नवकलप का चयि कीनजएः-

21

I x2 + x = 6

II y2 +7y+12 = 0

a If x gt y

b If x ge y

c If y gt x

d If y ge x

e If x = y or no relation can be established

Sol

I 1199092 + 3119909 minus 2119909 = 0

119909(119909 + 3) minus 2(119909 + 3) = 0

(119909 minus 2)(119909 + 3) + 0

119909 = 2 minus3

II 1199102 + 3119910 + 4119910 + 12 = 0

(119910 + 3)(119910 + 4) = 0

119910 = minus3 minus4 rArr 119909 ge 119910

22

I 2x2 + x ndash 1 = 0

II y2 -7y +10 = 0

a) If x gt y

b) If x ge y

c) If y gt x

d) If y ge x

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

e) If x = y or no relation can be established

Sol

I 21199092 + 2119909 minus 119909 minus 1 = 0

2119909(119909 + 1) minus 1(119909 + 1) = 0

(2119909 minus 1)(119909 + 1) = 0

119909 =1

2 minus1

II 1199102 minus 2119910 minus 5119910 + 10 = 0

119910(119910 minus 2) minus 5(119910 minus 2) = 0

(119910 minus 5)(119910 minus 2) = 0

119910 = 2 5 rArr 119909 lt 119910

23

I 12x2 -7x+ 1 = 0

II 3y2 -4y +1 = 0

a If x gt y

b If x ge y

c If y gt x

d If y ge x

e If x = y or no relation can be established

Sol

I 121199092 minus 3119909 minus 4119909 + 1 = 0

3119909(4119909 minus 1) minus 1(4119909 minus 1) = 0

(3119909 minus 1)(4119909 minus 1) = 0

119909 =1

31

4

II 31199102 minus 3119910 minus 119910 + 1 = 0

3119910(119910 minus 1) minus 1(119910 minus 1) = 0

(3119910 minus 1)(119910 minus 1) = 0

119910 =1

3 1

rArr 119909 le 119910

24

I x2 + 5x + 6 = 0

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

II 4y2 + 3y -1 = 0

a If x gt y

b If x ge y

c If y gt x

d If y ge x

e If x = y or no relation can be established

Sol c)

I 1199092 + 2119909 + 3119909 + 6 = 0

(119909 + 2)(119909 + 3) = 0

119909 = minus2 minus3

II 41199102 + 4119910 minus 119910 minus 1 = 0

4119910(119910 + 1) minus 1(119910 + 1) = 0

119910 =1

4 minus1

rArr 119909 lt 119910

25

I x2 + 2x - 8 = 0

II y2 + 2y -3 = 0

a If x gt y

b If x ge y

c If y gt x

d If y ge x

e If x = y or no relation can be established

Sol

I 1199092 + 4119909 minus 2119909 minus 8 = 0

(119909 + 2)(119909 + 4) = 0

119909 = 2 minus4

II 1199102 + 3119910 minus 119910 minus 3 = 0

(119910 + 3)(119910 + 1) = 0

119910 = minus3 1

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

No relation can be established between 119909 amp 119910

Direction (26-30) What should come in place of the question mark () in the

following questions

नरदशा (26-30) निमननिखित परशनो म परश नचहन () क सथाि पर कया आिा चानहए

26

32 of 500 times 2 4 of = 288

(a) 650

(b) 700

(c) 600

(d) 750

(e) 850

Sol

16 times24100 = 288

= 750

27

(ndash251 times 21 times (ndash 12)) divide = 15813

(a) 250

(b) 400

(c) 300

(d) 15

(e) 18

Sol

(minus251 times 21 times (minus12))

=

15813

100

= 400

28

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

[(120783120785120782)120784 divide 120784120787 times 120783120787] divide 120785120782 =

(a) 352

(b) 314

(c) 326

(d) 338

(e) 426

Sol

= [130times130

25times 15]

1

30 = 338

29

(65 of 375) ndash (085 of 230) =

(a) 2342

(b) 2424

(c) 2164

(d) 2576

(e) 2242

Sol

= 24375 minus 1955 = 22420

30

[(120787radic120787 + radic120787) times (120786radic120787 + 120790radic120787)] minus (120783120791)120784 =

(a) - 1

(b) 1radic5

(c) 1

(d) minus1radic5

(e) 11

Sol

=6radic5 times 12radic5 minus 361

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

= 360 minus 361

= minus1

31

The average income of Rohan and Sandeep is Rs 300 The average income of

Amit and Raju is Rs 200 The average income of Rohan Sandeep Amit and

Raju is

रनहि और सोरदीप की औसत आय 300 र ह अनमत और राज की औसत आय 200 र ह तन

रनहि सोरदीप अनमत और राज की औसत आय कया ह

200

250

300

350

None of these

Sol

The average income of Rohan and Sandeep is Rs 300

So the total income of Rohan and Sandeep = Rs (300 times 2) = Rs 600

The average income of Amit and Raju is Rs 200

So the total income of Amit and Raju = Rs (200 times 2) = Rs 400

The total income of Rohan Sandeep Amit and Raju = Rs (600 + 400) = Rs

1000

The average income of Rohan Sandeep Amit and Raju = Rs (10004) = Rs

250

32

Number of students in a school in March every year increases by 10 from the

previous year If the school had 3200 students in March 2010 how many

students did it have in March 2012

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

एक सकि म परतयक वरव माचव म नपछि वरव की तििा म छातरनो की सोखया म 10 की वखि

हनती ह| यनरद माचव 2010 म सकि म 3200 छातर ह तन माचव 2012 म छातरनो की सोखया कया थी

3472

3872

4372

3072

None of these

sol

Number of students in a school in March 2010 = 3200

Given Every year increase in number of students = 10 from previous year

Thus in March 2011

Number of students in school = (100 + 10) of 3200 = 110 of 3200

= (110100) times 3200 = 3520

In March 2012

Number of students in school = 110 of 3520

= (110100) times 3520 = 3872

33

In two consecutive years 100 and 75 students of a school attend the final

examinations Of these 75 and 60 of the candidates passed

respectively Average passing rate is

रदन करमागत वरो म एक नवदयािय क 100 और 75 नवदयाथी अोनतम परीकषा म उपखसथत हनत ह

उिम स करमश 75 और 60 उममीरदवार उततीणव हए उततीणव हनि की औसत रदर ह

68

55

87

76

None of these

sol

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

34

4 containers are in the shape of a sphere of radius 7cm find the cost of

panting at Rs2 per square metre and filling them with a liquid costing Rs9per

cubic cm

4 को टिर एक गनि क आकार म ह नजसकी नतरजया 7 समी ह 2 रपय परनत वगव मीटर पर

पताई की िागत का पता िगाएो और उसम तरि 9 रपय परनत घि समी की िागत क साथ

िरा जाता ह

Rs12470

Rs12890

Rs12320

Rs12936

None of these

Sol

Surface area of the sphere = 4⊓r2

Surface area of the containers =422772

rarr= 616 cm2

Cost of painting =Rs2 616(surface area )= Rs1232

For filling the containers you need to calculate the volume of the sphere using

the formula 43⊓r3

Cost of filling = Rs9 volume of sphere = Rs943⊓73 = Rs12936

35

The present age of A and B are in the ratio 9 11 Twelve years hence the ratio

of their ages will be 13 15 Find the age of B fourteen years from now

A और B की वतवमाि आय 9 11 क अिपात म ह 12 वरव बारद उिकी आय का अिपात 13

15 हनगा अब स 14 वरव बारद B की आय जञात कीनजए

30 Years

CLICK HERE TO FULL SBI CLERK FREE COURSE

40 years

37 years

47 years

None of these

Sol

Let present age of A and B are 9x and 11x respectively

(9x + 12) (11x + 12) = 1315

135x + 180 = 143x + 156

8x = 24

x = 3

Hence the age of B fourteen years from now = 11x + 14 = 33 + 14 = 47 years

Direction (71-80) Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions given below it Certain words have been printed in bold to help you to locate them while answering some of the questions Right through history imperial powers have clung to their possessions to death Why then did Britain in 1947 give up the jewel in its crown India For many reasons The independence struggle exposed the hollowness of the white manrsquos burden Provincial self-rule since 1935 paved the way for full self-rule Churchill resisted independence but the Labour Government of Atlee was anti-imperialist by ideology Finally the Royal Indian Navy Mutiny in 1946 raised fears of a second Sepoy Mutiny and convinced British waverers that it was safer to withdraw gracefully But politico-military explanations are not enough The basis of empire was always money The end of the empire had much to do with the fact that British imperialism had ceased to be profitable World War II left Britain victorious but deeply indebted needing Marshall Aid and loans from the World Bank This constituted a strong financial case for ending the no-longer-profitable empire Empire building is expensive The US is spending one billion dollars a day in operations in Iraq that fall well short of full-scale imperialism Through the centuries empire building was costly yet constantly undertaken because it promised high returns The investment was in armies and conquest The returns came through plunder and taxes from the conquered No immorality was attached to imperial loot and plunder The biggest conquerors were typically revered (hence titles like Alexander the Great Akbar the Great and Peter the Great) The bigger and richer the empire the more the plunderer was admired This mindset gradually changed with the rise of new ideas about equality and governing for the public good ideas that culminated in the French and the American Revolutions Robert Clive was impeached for making a little money on the side and so was Warren Hastings The white manrsquos burden came up as a new moral rationale for conquest It was supposedly for the Princeton good of the conquered This led to much-muddled hypocrisy On the one hand the empire needed to be profitable On the other hand the white manrsquos burden made brazen loot impossible An additional factor deterring lost was the 1857 Sepoy Mutiny Though crushed it reminded the British vividly that they were a tiny ethnic group who could not rule a gigantic subcontinent without the support of important locals After 1857 the British stopped annexing one princely state after another and instead treated the princes as allies Land revenue was fixed in absolute terms partly to prevent local unrest and partly to promote the notion of the white manrsquos burden The empire proclaimed itself to be a protector of the Indian peasant against exploitation by Indian elites This was denounced as hypocrisy by nationalists like Dadabhai Naoroji in the 19th century who complained that land taxes led to an enormous drain from India to Britain Objective calculations by historians like Angus Maddison suggest a drain of perhaps 16 percent of Indian Gross National Product in the 19th century But land revenue was more or less fixed by the Raj in absolute terms and so its real value diminished rapidly with inflation in the 20th century By World War II India had ceased to be a profit centre for the British Empire Historically conquered nations paid taxes to finance fresh wars of the conqueror India itself was asked to pay a large sum at the end of World War I to help repair Britainrsquos finances But as shown by historian IndivarKamtekar the independence movement led by Gandhiji changed the political landscape and made mass-taxation of India increasingly difficult By World War II this had become politically impossible Far from taxing India to pay for World War II Britain actually began paying India for its contribution of men and goods Troops from white dominions like Australia Canada and New Zealand were paid for entirely by these countries but Indian costs were shared by the British government Britain paid in the form of non-convertible sterling balances which mounted swiftly The conqueror was paying the conquered undercutting the profitability on which all empire is founded Churchill opposed this and wanted to tax India rather than owe it money But he was overruled by Indian hands who said India would resist payment and paralyze the war effort Leo Amery Secretary of State for India said that when you are driving in a taxi to the station to catch a life-or-death train you do not loudly announce that you have doubts whether

to pay the fare Thus World War II converted India from a debtor to a creditor with over one billion pounds in sterling balances Britain meanwhile became the biggest debtor in the world Itrsquos not worth ruling over people who are afraid to tax Q71 What was the main lesson the British learned from the Sepoy Mutiny of 1857 1 That the local princes were allies not foes 2 That the land revenue from India would decline dramatically 3 That the British were a small ethnic group 4 That India would be increasingly difficult to rule 5 None of these Solution71 4 The first few lines of the 3rd paragraph show that after mutiny the British realized that ruling India would be affected as they were in the minority and they need the support of the locals to do so which was becoming less So they concluded India would be increasingly difficult to rule Q72 Why didnrsquot Britain tax India to finance its World War II efforts 1 Australia Canada and New Zealand had offered to pay for the Indian troops 2 India had already paid a sufficiently large sum during World War I 3 It was afraid that if India refused to pay Britainrsquos war efforts would be jeopardised 4 The British empire was built on the premise that the conqueror pays the conquered 5 None of these Solution 72 3 Refer to the last paragraph of the passage ldquoChurchill opposed this and wanted to tax India rather than owe it money But he was overruled by Indian hands who said India would resist payment and paralyze the war effortrsquo Q73 Which of the following was NOT a reason for the emergence of the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo as a new rationale for empire building in India 1 The emergence of the idea of the public good as an element of governance 2 The decreasing returns from imperial loot and increasing costs of conquest 3 The weakening of the immorality attached to an emperorrsquos looting behaviour 4 A growing awareness of the idea of equality among peoples

5 None of these Solution73 2 The decreasing returns from imperial rule and increasing costs of conquest was not the reason for the emergence of the concept of lsquothe white manrsquos burdenrsquo as a rationale for empire building Q74 Which of the following best expresses the main purpose of the author 1 To present the various reasons that can lead to the collapse of an empire and the granting of independence to the subjects of an empire 2 To point out the critical role played by the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo in making a colonizing power give up its claims to native possessions 3 To highlight the contradictory impulse underpinning empire building which is a costly business but very attractive at the same time 4 To illustrate how erosion of the financial basis of an empire supports the granting of independence to an empirersquos constituents 5 None of these Solution 74 1 The author tries to explain the various reasons for the end of the empire and subsequent granting of freedom to the subjects in the passage and that is its main idea Although the 4th option is one of the reasons for the same there were many more reasons Q75 Which of the following best captures the meaning of the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo as it is used by the author 1 The British claim to a civilizing mission directed at ensuring the good of the natives 2 The inspiration for the French and the American Revolutions 3 The resource drain that had to be borne by the home countryrsquos white population 4 An imperative that made open looting of resources impossible 5 None of these Solution 75 1 The British claimed the superiority of their race and showed it as their moral obligation to help in civilizing the natives

Q76 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Convinced 1 accede 2 audacious 3 flounder 4 Persuade 5 bountiful Solution764 Convinced means cause (someone) to believe firmly in the truth of something Hence it has same meaning as Persuade Audacious - showing a willingness to take surprisingly bold risks Flounder means struggle mentally show or feel great confusion Accede means agree to a demand request or treaty Q77 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Impeached 1 fester 2 indicted 3 paltry 4 murky 5 contentious Solution77 2 Prospective means expected or expecting to be the specified thing in the future Hence it has same meaning as indicted Paltry means very small Murky means obscure or morally questionable Contentious means causing or likely to cause an argument controversial Fester means become worse or more intense especially through long-term neglect or indifference Q78 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Hypocrisy 1 abate 2 honesty 3 candor 4 despair 5 coax Solution78 2 Hypocrisy means the practice of claiming to have higher standards or more noble beliefs than is the case Hence it has opposite meaning as honesty

Abate means become less intense or widespread Candor means the quality of being open and honest frankness Coax means persuade (someone) gradually or gently to do something Q79 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Brazen 1 abet 2 abrogate 3 predicament 4 embolden 5 timid Solution79 5 Brazen means bold and without shame Hence it has opposite meaning as timid Abet means encourage or assist (someone) to do something wrong in particular to commit a crime Abrogate means to cancel officially Embolden means give (someone) the courage or confidence to do something Predicament means a difficult unpleasant or embarrassing situation Q80 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Proclaimed 1 intrepid 2 Prospective 3 pronounced 4 probable 5 trivial Solution80 3 Proclaimed means bold and without shame Hence it has the same meaning as pronounced Trivial- of little value or importance Intrepid- fearless adventurous (often used for rhetorical or humorous effect) Q81 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete Industrial activity in the new financial year appears to have started on a____________ note than the trend witnessed in the last quarter _____________ the previous fiscal the governmentrsquos latest quick estimates show

1 healthier of 2 caused from 3 number by 4 coming to 5 toll in Solution81 1 lsquohealthier ofrsquo is the correct option Q82 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete One of the great truisms of our public life especially _____________ through social media is that it is full of abuse snark insinuation and in some cases threats of ______________ and more 1 by busy 2 mediated violence 3 to indulged 4 before involved 5 nomenclature burried Solution82 2 lsquomediated violencersquo is the correct option Q83 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The nutritive values of menus with ____________ used in the mentioned amounts certainly meet and often exceed the prescribed energy (Kcal) and protein ______________ prescribed by Ministry of Human Resource Development for the Mid-Day Meal

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

to pay the fare Thus World War II converted India from a debtor to a creditor with over one billion pounds in sterling balances Britain meanwhile became the biggest debtor in the world Itrsquos not worth ruling over people who are afraid to tax Q71 What was the main lesson the British learned from the Sepoy Mutiny of 1857 1 That the local princes were allies not foes 2 That the land revenue from India would decline dramatically 3 That the British were a small ethnic group 4 That India would be increasingly difficult to rule 5 None of these Solution71 4 The first few lines of the 3rd paragraph show that after mutiny the British realized that ruling India would be affected as they were in the minority and they need the support of the locals to do so which was becoming less So they concluded India would be increasingly difficult to rule Q72 Why didnrsquot Britain tax India to finance its World War II efforts 1 Australia Canada and New Zealand had offered to pay for the Indian troops 2 India had already paid a sufficiently large sum during World War I 3 It was afraid that if India refused to pay Britainrsquos war efforts would be jeopardised 4 The British empire was built on the premise that the conqueror pays the conquered 5 None of these Solution 72 3 Refer to the last paragraph of the passage ldquoChurchill opposed this and wanted to tax India rather than owe it money But he was overruled by Indian hands who said India would resist payment and paralyze the war effortrsquo Q73 Which of the following was NOT a reason for the emergence of the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo as a new rationale for empire building in India 1 The emergence of the idea of the public good as an element of governance 2 The decreasing returns from imperial loot and increasing costs of conquest 3 The weakening of the immorality attached to an emperorrsquos looting behaviour 4 A growing awareness of the idea of equality among peoples

5 None of these Solution73 2 The decreasing returns from imperial rule and increasing costs of conquest was not the reason for the emergence of the concept of lsquothe white manrsquos burdenrsquo as a rationale for empire building Q74 Which of the following best expresses the main purpose of the author 1 To present the various reasons that can lead to the collapse of an empire and the granting of independence to the subjects of an empire 2 To point out the critical role played by the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo in making a colonizing power give up its claims to native possessions 3 To highlight the contradictory impulse underpinning empire building which is a costly business but very attractive at the same time 4 To illustrate how erosion of the financial basis of an empire supports the granting of independence to an empirersquos constituents 5 None of these Solution 74 1 The author tries to explain the various reasons for the end of the empire and subsequent granting of freedom to the subjects in the passage and that is its main idea Although the 4th option is one of the reasons for the same there were many more reasons Q75 Which of the following best captures the meaning of the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo as it is used by the author 1 The British claim to a civilizing mission directed at ensuring the good of the natives 2 The inspiration for the French and the American Revolutions 3 The resource drain that had to be borne by the home countryrsquos white population 4 An imperative that made open looting of resources impossible 5 None of these Solution 75 1 The British claimed the superiority of their race and showed it as their moral obligation to help in civilizing the natives

Q76 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Convinced 1 accede 2 audacious 3 flounder 4 Persuade 5 bountiful Solution764 Convinced means cause (someone) to believe firmly in the truth of something Hence it has same meaning as Persuade Audacious - showing a willingness to take surprisingly bold risks Flounder means struggle mentally show or feel great confusion Accede means agree to a demand request or treaty Q77 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Impeached 1 fester 2 indicted 3 paltry 4 murky 5 contentious Solution77 2 Prospective means expected or expecting to be the specified thing in the future Hence it has same meaning as indicted Paltry means very small Murky means obscure or morally questionable Contentious means causing or likely to cause an argument controversial Fester means become worse or more intense especially through long-term neglect or indifference Q78 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Hypocrisy 1 abate 2 honesty 3 candor 4 despair 5 coax Solution78 2 Hypocrisy means the practice of claiming to have higher standards or more noble beliefs than is the case Hence it has opposite meaning as honesty

Abate means become less intense or widespread Candor means the quality of being open and honest frankness Coax means persuade (someone) gradually or gently to do something Q79 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Brazen 1 abet 2 abrogate 3 predicament 4 embolden 5 timid Solution79 5 Brazen means bold and without shame Hence it has opposite meaning as timid Abet means encourage or assist (someone) to do something wrong in particular to commit a crime Abrogate means to cancel officially Embolden means give (someone) the courage or confidence to do something Predicament means a difficult unpleasant or embarrassing situation Q80 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Proclaimed 1 intrepid 2 Prospective 3 pronounced 4 probable 5 trivial Solution80 3 Proclaimed means bold and without shame Hence it has the same meaning as pronounced Trivial- of little value or importance Intrepid- fearless adventurous (often used for rhetorical or humorous effect) Q81 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete Industrial activity in the new financial year appears to have started on a____________ note than the trend witnessed in the last quarter _____________ the previous fiscal the governmentrsquos latest quick estimates show

1 healthier of 2 caused from 3 number by 4 coming to 5 toll in Solution81 1 lsquohealthier ofrsquo is the correct option Q82 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete One of the great truisms of our public life especially _____________ through social media is that it is full of abuse snark insinuation and in some cases threats of ______________ and more 1 by busy 2 mediated violence 3 to indulged 4 before involved 5 nomenclature burried Solution82 2 lsquomediated violencersquo is the correct option Q83 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The nutritive values of menus with ____________ used in the mentioned amounts certainly meet and often exceed the prescribed energy (Kcal) and protein ______________ prescribed by Ministry of Human Resource Development for the Mid-Day Meal

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

5 None of these Solution73 2 The decreasing returns from imperial rule and increasing costs of conquest was not the reason for the emergence of the concept of lsquothe white manrsquos burdenrsquo as a rationale for empire building Q74 Which of the following best expresses the main purpose of the author 1 To present the various reasons that can lead to the collapse of an empire and the granting of independence to the subjects of an empire 2 To point out the critical role played by the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo in making a colonizing power give up its claims to native possessions 3 To highlight the contradictory impulse underpinning empire building which is a costly business but very attractive at the same time 4 To illustrate how erosion of the financial basis of an empire supports the granting of independence to an empirersquos constituents 5 None of these Solution 74 1 The author tries to explain the various reasons for the end of the empire and subsequent granting of freedom to the subjects in the passage and that is its main idea Although the 4th option is one of the reasons for the same there were many more reasons Q75 Which of the following best captures the meaning of the lsquowhite manrsquos burdenrsquo as it is used by the author 1 The British claim to a civilizing mission directed at ensuring the good of the natives 2 The inspiration for the French and the American Revolutions 3 The resource drain that had to be borne by the home countryrsquos white population 4 An imperative that made open looting of resources impossible 5 None of these Solution 75 1 The British claimed the superiority of their race and showed it as their moral obligation to help in civilizing the natives

Q76 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Convinced 1 accede 2 audacious 3 flounder 4 Persuade 5 bountiful Solution764 Convinced means cause (someone) to believe firmly in the truth of something Hence it has same meaning as Persuade Audacious - showing a willingness to take surprisingly bold risks Flounder means struggle mentally show or feel great confusion Accede means agree to a demand request or treaty Q77 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Impeached 1 fester 2 indicted 3 paltry 4 murky 5 contentious Solution77 2 Prospective means expected or expecting to be the specified thing in the future Hence it has same meaning as indicted Paltry means very small Murky means obscure or morally questionable Contentious means causing or likely to cause an argument controversial Fester means become worse or more intense especially through long-term neglect or indifference Q78 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Hypocrisy 1 abate 2 honesty 3 candor 4 despair 5 coax Solution78 2 Hypocrisy means the practice of claiming to have higher standards or more noble beliefs than is the case Hence it has opposite meaning as honesty

Abate means become less intense or widespread Candor means the quality of being open and honest frankness Coax means persuade (someone) gradually or gently to do something Q79 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Brazen 1 abet 2 abrogate 3 predicament 4 embolden 5 timid Solution79 5 Brazen means bold and without shame Hence it has opposite meaning as timid Abet means encourage or assist (someone) to do something wrong in particular to commit a crime Abrogate means to cancel officially Embolden means give (someone) the courage or confidence to do something Predicament means a difficult unpleasant or embarrassing situation Q80 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Proclaimed 1 intrepid 2 Prospective 3 pronounced 4 probable 5 trivial Solution80 3 Proclaimed means bold and without shame Hence it has the same meaning as pronounced Trivial- of little value or importance Intrepid- fearless adventurous (often used for rhetorical or humorous effect) Q81 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete Industrial activity in the new financial year appears to have started on a____________ note than the trend witnessed in the last quarter _____________ the previous fiscal the governmentrsquos latest quick estimates show

1 healthier of 2 caused from 3 number by 4 coming to 5 toll in Solution81 1 lsquohealthier ofrsquo is the correct option Q82 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete One of the great truisms of our public life especially _____________ through social media is that it is full of abuse snark insinuation and in some cases threats of ______________ and more 1 by busy 2 mediated violence 3 to indulged 4 before involved 5 nomenclature burried Solution82 2 lsquomediated violencersquo is the correct option Q83 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The nutritive values of menus with ____________ used in the mentioned amounts certainly meet and often exceed the prescribed energy (Kcal) and protein ______________ prescribed by Ministry of Human Resource Development for the Mid-Day Meal

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q76 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Convinced 1 accede 2 audacious 3 flounder 4 Persuade 5 bountiful Solution764 Convinced means cause (someone) to believe firmly in the truth of something Hence it has same meaning as Persuade Audacious - showing a willingness to take surprisingly bold risks Flounder means struggle mentally show or feel great confusion Accede means agree to a demand request or treaty Q77 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Impeached 1 fester 2 indicted 3 paltry 4 murky 5 contentious Solution77 2 Prospective means expected or expecting to be the specified thing in the future Hence it has same meaning as indicted Paltry means very small Murky means obscure or morally questionable Contentious means causing or likely to cause an argument controversial Fester means become worse or more intense especially through long-term neglect or indifference Q78 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Hypocrisy 1 abate 2 honesty 3 candor 4 despair 5 coax Solution78 2 Hypocrisy means the practice of claiming to have higher standards or more noble beliefs than is the case Hence it has opposite meaning as honesty

Abate means become less intense or widespread Candor means the quality of being open and honest frankness Coax means persuade (someone) gradually or gently to do something Q79 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Brazen 1 abet 2 abrogate 3 predicament 4 embolden 5 timid Solution79 5 Brazen means bold and without shame Hence it has opposite meaning as timid Abet means encourage or assist (someone) to do something wrong in particular to commit a crime Abrogate means to cancel officially Embolden means give (someone) the courage or confidence to do something Predicament means a difficult unpleasant or embarrassing situation Q80 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Proclaimed 1 intrepid 2 Prospective 3 pronounced 4 probable 5 trivial Solution80 3 Proclaimed means bold and without shame Hence it has the same meaning as pronounced Trivial- of little value or importance Intrepid- fearless adventurous (often used for rhetorical or humorous effect) Q81 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete Industrial activity in the new financial year appears to have started on a____________ note than the trend witnessed in the last quarter _____________ the previous fiscal the governmentrsquos latest quick estimates show

1 healthier of 2 caused from 3 number by 4 coming to 5 toll in Solution81 1 lsquohealthier ofrsquo is the correct option Q82 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete One of the great truisms of our public life especially _____________ through social media is that it is full of abuse snark insinuation and in some cases threats of ______________ and more 1 by busy 2 mediated violence 3 to indulged 4 before involved 5 nomenclature burried Solution82 2 lsquomediated violencersquo is the correct option Q83 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The nutritive values of menus with ____________ used in the mentioned amounts certainly meet and often exceed the prescribed energy (Kcal) and protein ______________ prescribed by Ministry of Human Resource Development for the Mid-Day Meal

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Abate means become less intense or widespread Candor means the quality of being open and honest frankness Coax means persuade (someone) gradually or gently to do something Q79 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most opposite meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Brazen 1 abet 2 abrogate 3 predicament 4 embolden 5 timid Solution79 5 Brazen means bold and without shame Hence it has opposite meaning as timid Abet means encourage or assist (someone) to do something wrong in particular to commit a crime Abrogate means to cancel officially Embolden means give (someone) the courage or confidence to do something Predicament means a difficult unpleasant or embarrassing situation Q80 Which of the following alternatives among the five options provides the most similar meaning(s) of the word given in BOLD as used in the passage Proclaimed 1 intrepid 2 Prospective 3 pronounced 4 probable 5 trivial Solution80 3 Proclaimed means bold and without shame Hence it has the same meaning as pronounced Trivial- of little value or importance Intrepid- fearless adventurous (often used for rhetorical or humorous effect) Q81 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete Industrial activity in the new financial year appears to have started on a____________ note than the trend witnessed in the last quarter _____________ the previous fiscal the governmentrsquos latest quick estimates show

1 healthier of 2 caused from 3 number by 4 coming to 5 toll in Solution81 1 lsquohealthier ofrsquo is the correct option Q82 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete One of the great truisms of our public life especially _____________ through social media is that it is full of abuse snark insinuation and in some cases threats of ______________ and more 1 by busy 2 mediated violence 3 to indulged 4 before involved 5 nomenclature burried Solution82 2 lsquomediated violencersquo is the correct option Q83 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The nutritive values of menus with ____________ used in the mentioned amounts certainly meet and often exceed the prescribed energy (Kcal) and protein ______________ prescribed by Ministry of Human Resource Development for the Mid-Day Meal

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

1 healthier of 2 caused from 3 number by 4 coming to 5 toll in Solution81 1 lsquohealthier ofrsquo is the correct option Q82 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete One of the great truisms of our public life especially _____________ through social media is that it is full of abuse snark insinuation and in some cases threats of ______________ and more 1 by busy 2 mediated violence 3 to indulged 4 before involved 5 nomenclature burried Solution82 2 lsquomediated violencersquo is the correct option Q83 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The nutritive values of menus with ____________ used in the mentioned amounts certainly meet and often exceed the prescribed energy (Kcal) and protein ______________ prescribed by Ministry of Human Resource Development for the Mid-Day Meal

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

1 of flop 2 master collapse 3 builder sluggish 4 savy loss 5 ingredients requirements Solution 83 5 lsquoingredients requirementsrsquo is the correct option Q84 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete The Economic Survey for 2015-16 which was ______________ in Parliament on Friday suggested the policies must _______________ raising of production of pulses and oilseeds for which the country is heavily dependent on imports 1 presented be 2 introduced have 3 tabled incentivise 4 discussed result 5 debated cause Solution 84 3 lsquotabled incentivisersquo is the correct option Q85 In each of the following sentences there are two blank spaces Below each sentence there are five pairs of words denoted by numbers 1 to 5 Find out which pair of words can be filled up in the blanks in the sentence in the same sequence to make the sentence meaningfully complete

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

A 2017 proposal to set up a ____________ at the Air India building at Mumbairsquos Nariman Point had to be abandoned when the Union Cabinet decided to ________________ the airline 1 ruler alive 2 ruling pride 3 running out 4 ever revealing 5 museum privatise Solution 85 5 lsquomuseum privatisersquo is the correct option Q86 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) He should refrain to(B) associating himself with (C) any political party because people(D) have faith in his integrity (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution86 1 Refrain should be followed by from Hence to should be replaced with from Q87 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any)

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

(A) All the songs of (B) this Album are(C) worth listening(D) to(E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 87 4 to should not be used since worth listening is not followed by any preposition Q88 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Your success in UPSC examinations depends not only on (B) what papers you have selected (C) but on how (D) you have written them (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 88 3 But also is used together with not only Add also to but Q89 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) I havent been to (B) Europe before (C) and neither (D) my brother (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 89 3 Neither is followed by helping verb and then the subject Neither has my brother is the correct sentence form Q90 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Suppose if you are (B) late you will not be (C) allowed to enter (D) the auditorium (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 90 1 Remove ifrsquo from the sentence Suppose and lsquoifrsquo mean the same When used together they make the sentence superfluous Q91 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Unless she will not understand(B) the importance of this seminar (C) she will not (D) study sincerely (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 91 1 Change she will not understand into she understands Not and will do not come after unless Q92 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Rahul told his parents (B) that he would not (C) be able to come back on time (D) if it rains (E) No error 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 92 4 lsquoIf it rainedrsquo should be used in place of lsquoIf it rainsrsquo because Reporting verb in Indirect narration is in past Tense Q93 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) Artefacts in the collection recall the (B) heyday of the airline such as ashtrays (C) designed by surrealist Salvador Dali which(D) were meant to be gifted to first-class passengers (E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 93 5 No Error Q94 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) Had the opportunity (A) been given to her (B) she will have (C) proved successful (D) No Error (E) 1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 94 1 Solution In place of lsquoshe will haversquo lsquoshe would have beenrsquo will be used With Had+ subject + been + V3 Subject + would + have + been + V3 is used Ex Had he been taken to hospital he would have been saved Q95 Read each sentence to find out whether there is any error in it The error if any will be in one part of the sentence The number of that part is the answer If there is no error the answer is lsquoersquo (Ignore errors of punctuation if any) (A) The front page story(B) was about an old lady (C)that had hurt herself(D) while saving a child in an accident(E) No error

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

1 A 2 B 3 C 4 D 5 E Solution 95 3 lsquowhorsquo should be used in place of lsquothatrsquo Since Relative pronoun lsquowhorsquo is used as a subject in subordinate clause Q96 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) While the Modi government moves him to the centre stage of national conversation an effort is simultaneously underways to bringing about a confluence of Left and Ambedkarite politics 1 simultaneous underways to bring down 2 simultaneously underwent in bringing about 3 simultaneously underway for bringing about 4 simultaneously underway to bring about 5 No correction required Solution 96 Replace lsquosimultaneously underway to bringing aboutrsquo with lsquosimultaneously underway to bring aboutrsquo Q97 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) A US-European satellite that is fundamental to our understanding of the oceans have been launching from California 1 has launched 2 have launched 3 have been launched 4 has been launched 5 No correction required Solution 97 Replace lsquohave been launchingrsquo with lsquohas launchedrsquo Q98 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) In the northern hemisphere April will have a most confusing month rainy and wet one day the next full of a warm promise of green growth to come 1 April was the most confusing month 2 April has a most confusing month 3 April is a most confusing month 4 April has to be the most confusing month 5 No correction required Solution 98 Replace lsquoApril will have an important month forrsquo with lsquoApril is an important month forrsquo Q99 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) Pop superstar Prince which has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians of his era was found dead at his home on Thursday in suburban Minneapolis 1 who was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 2 who is widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 3 that was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musicians 4 which was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musician 5 No correction required Solution 99 Replace lsquowhich has been widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo with lsquowho was widely acclaimed as one of the most inventive musiciansrsquo Q100 In the following questions a sentence has been given with some of its parts in bold To make the sentence grammatically correct you have to replace the bold part with the correct alternative given below If the sentence is correct as it is give (E) as your answer (ie No correction required) The Enforcement Directorate has written to the Ministry of External Affairs for initiate deportation proceeding against businessman Sushen Mohan Gupta 1 to initiating deportation proceedings 2 to initiate deport proceedings 3 to initiate deportation proceedings 4 for initiating deportation proceeding 5 No correction required Solution 100 Replace lsquofor initiate deportation proceedingrsquo with lsquoto initiate deportation proceedingsrsquo

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O P Q

and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing north but not

necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another member of the other

row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the row Y

does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X who sits to the

left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O does not face V P sits

third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q और R

रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि करक बठ ह

िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय रदसरी पोखि ि बठ

अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा ह Y

पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X क सिाि

िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट बठ ह Z ि तन

O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो

ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी भी

अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so form a

group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस ह और

इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भाषा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भाषा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भाषा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस शबद क

निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भाषा ि निमननिखित ि

स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting at the

corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre O and S sit

immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between P and R T sits 2nd

to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face towards the center Two persons

sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent to each other according to the English

alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक नकिारनो

पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह रह क दर स रदर

िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि

पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q

और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क

नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह (अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो

बठा ह और इस परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क तरोत बाएो

ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the following does

not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is related to

N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N स

सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring to the word

sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क उततर

रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then which word

is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो छनर स

कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and then the

words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out the third letter of

the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर शबदनो

कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा अिर जञात कर

जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical series

then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल अिर ि

बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find which of the

conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकषो ि स

कौि सा निषकषव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकषव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo is

definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि सा

कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt Wrsquo is

definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित रप स

सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two boxes are

placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of boxes placed below

A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above box C Two boxes are between

C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are between G and F Only one box is

placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स अनिक बकस

िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया क

बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह

C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा

गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन

E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then the vowels

are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next letter as per the English

alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए और

कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति अिर एक स अनिक बार

िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Five पाोच

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are only

two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the aunt of C who

is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male child B is father of I

who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि करि रदन

नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की आोट ह जन F

का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क करि रदन िडक ह B

I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 रषव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 रषव

40 years 40 रषव

41 years 41 रषव

14 years 14 रषव

30 years 30 रषव

Direction(30-34) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a famous hall of

Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but not necessarily in the

same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on dates 9th or 18th Only one

businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting after E D

will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting between B and H B

will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G There is no one between D

and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the meeting between B and G Two

businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि भाग

िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि जररी िही ो

नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िग | रदी गई इि

तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग िगा D

नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग B नरदए

गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स पहि बठक ि D और G

क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

E

C

G

A

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the one that

does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह इिि स

कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Direction (1-5) Read the following information carefully and answer the questions that

follow

Twelve friends are sitting in two parallel rows containing six persons each In row 1 M N O

P Q and R are sitting and facing south In row 2 U V W X Y and Z are sitting and facing

north but not necessarily in the same order Each member seated in a row faces another

member of the other row

There are more than two persons between Y and W Neither P nor M sits any ends of the

row Y does not sit any ends of the row Q is not an immediate neighbour of P and faces X

who sits to the left of V W and U are the immediate neighbours Z faces neither O nor R O

does not face V P sits third to the right of M

निरदश िीच रदी गयी जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर निमननिखित परशनो क उततर रद

बारह नितर रदन सिािाोतर पोखियनो ि बठ ह नजिि परतयक ि छह वयखि ह पोखि 1 ि M N O P Q

और R रदनिण की ओर िि करक बठ ह पोखि 2 ि U V W X Y और Z उततर की ओर िि

करक बठ ह िनकि जररी िही ो नक उसी करि ि हन एक पोखि ि बठा परतयक सरदसय

रदसरी पोखि ि बठ अनय सरदसय क ठीक सािि िि करक बठा ह

Y और W क बीच रदन स अनिक वयखि ह ि तन P और ि ही M पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठा

ह Y पोखि क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठा ह Q P क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठा ह और X

क सिाि िि करक बठा ह जन V क बाएो ओर बठा ह W और U एक रदसर क नबलकि

निकट बठ ह Z ि तन O और ि ही R क सािि िि करक बठा ह O V क सािि िि

करक िही ो बठा ह P M क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह

1 Who of the following faces Y

निमननिखित ि स नकसका िि Y क सािि ह

M

N

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P

Q

O

Solution

M faces Y M का िि Y क सािि ह

2 Which among the following pairs represent those who sit any ends of the rows

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा सिह उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करता ह जन पोखि क नकसी

भी अोनति छनर पर बठ ह

Q W

O U

N V

W R

None of the above इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution

W and R represent those who sit any ends of the rows

W और R उि िनगनो का परनतनिनितव करत ह जन पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर बठ

ह|

3 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Q

V

N

Z

U

Ans

Rest of them does not sit any ends of the rows

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

उिि स बाकी पोखियनो क नकसी भी अोनति छनर पर िही ो बठ ह

4 Who is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत कौि बठा ह

Z

X

Y

W

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans 4)

Solution

W is sitting opposite to O

O क नरपरीत W बठा ह

5 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on their seating positions and so

form a group Who of the following is different from that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार अपि बठि की खसथनत क आिार पर एक परकार स एक जस

ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

P-U

N-Z

R-V

Q-Y

W-O

Solution निषकरव

Rest of them facing each other

बाकी क एक रदसर क सािि ह

Direction (6-9) Study the following information carefully and answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

In a certain code language

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo is written as lsquoaa ac ce eersquo

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo is written as lsquocc aa ab barsquo

lsquofor people of idearsquo is written as lsquoee cc ac earsquo and

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo is written as lsquoce ac cc eersquo

एक निनित कट भारा ि

lsquopeople of the Indiarsquo कन lsquoaa ac ce eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquolearning creating the idearsquo कन lsquocc aa ab barsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

lsquofor people of idearsquo कन lsquoee cc ac earsquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह और

rsquoIndia of people idearsquo कन lsquoce ac cc eersquo क रप ि नििा जाता ह

Solution

Q6 Which of the following means lsquopeoplersquo in that code language

उसी कट भारा ि निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquopeoplersquo ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

ac

ce

aa

Either ee or ac या तन ee या ac

ee

Solution

Thus lsquopeoplersquo is coded as either lsquoeersquo or ac

इसपरकार lsquopeoplersquo कन या तन ee या ac क रप ि कटबदध नकया गया ह

Q7 Code lsquoabrsquo is for which word in the given language रदी गई भारा ि कट lsquoabrsquo नकस

शबद क निए ह

learning

creating

the

idea

Either 1) or 2)

Ans 5)

Solution

lsquoabrsquo is code for either lsquolearningrsquo or lsquocreatingrsquo lsquoabrsquo कट या तन lsquolearningrsquo या lsquocreatingrsquo क

निए ह

Q8 What would be the code for lsquolearning for Indiarsquo

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

lsquolearning for Indiarsquo क निए कया कट हनगा

ac ae ba

ab ba ce

ca cc ac

ce ea ba

ab ee ba

Ans 4)

Solution

Code for lsquolearningrsquo is either lsquobarsquo or lsquoabrsquo

Hence the possible answer is lsquoce ea barsquo

lsquolearningrsquo क निए कट या तन lsquobarsquo या lsquoabrsquo ह

इसनिए सोभानरत उततर lsquoce ea barsquo ह

Q9 Which of the following means lsquoIndiarsquo in that code language उस कट-भारा ि

निमननिखित ि स नकसका अथव lsquoIndiarsquo हनगा

ac

cc

ce

Either (1) or (2) or (3) या तन (1) या (2) या (3)

ae

Ans 3)

Solution

Hence the code for lsquoIndiarsquo is lsquocersquo

इसनिए lsquoIndiarsquo क निए कट lsquocersquo ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Directions (10-14) Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given

below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight persons M N O P Q R S T are sitting around a square table such that persons sitting

at the corners face inside and the one at the middle of the sides faces away from the centre

O and S sit immediate right to each other Q sits 2nd to the right of P N sits exactly between

P and R T sits 2nd to the right of the one who is 3rd to the right to P M does not face

towards the center Two persons sit between Q and O No two persons are sitting adjacent

to each other according to the English alphabet (ie M is not next to N N is not next to M

and O and so on)

आठ वयखि M N O P Q R S T एक रगावकार िज क चारनो इस परकार बठ हए ह नक

नकिारनो पर बठ वयखियनो का िि अोरदर की ओर ह और जन वयखि भजा क िधय ि ह

रह क दर स रदर िि नकए हए ह O और S एक रदसर क तरोत रदाएो ओर बठ ह P क

रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर Q बठा ह P और R क नबलकि िधय ि N बठा ह T उस

वयखि क रदाएो ओर स रदसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन P क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर

बठा ह M का िि क दर की ओर िही ो ह Q और O क बीच रदन िनग बठ ह अोगरजी

रणविािा क अिसार कनई भी रदन वयखि एक रदसर क नबलकि निकट िही ो बठ ह

(अथावत MN क निकट िही ो बठा ह NM और O क निकट िही ो बठा ह और इस

परकार अनय भी)

10 Who among the following sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस वयखि क रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर बठा ह जन Q क

तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

S

R

Ans

R sits 3rd to the right of the one who sits immediate left to Q

जन वयखि Q क तरोत बाएो ओर बठा ह उसक रदाएो ओर स तीसर सथाि पर R ह

11 Who among the following sits opposite O

निमननिखित ि स कौि O क नरपरीत बठा ह

T

M

R

S

N

Ansउततर

T sits opposite O

O क नरपरीत T बठा ह

12 Four of the five are alike in a certain way and hence form a group who among the

following does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए सिह बिात ह

निमननिखित ि स कौि उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

T

M

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

R

O

N

Ansउततर

R does not belong to that group

R उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

13 If in a certain way P is related to Q S is related to R then who among the following is

related to N

यनरद एक परकार स P Q स सोबोनित ह S R स सोबोनित ह तन निमननिखित ि स कौि N

स सोबोनित हनगा

T

M

R

S

P

Ans

T is related to N

T N स सोबोनित ह

14 Who among the following are the immediate neighbors of M

निमननिखित ि स कौि M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

T N

S Q

R Q

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

O P

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

S and Q are the immediate neighbour of M

S और Q M क नबलकि निकट बठ ह

Directions (15-17) Study the following questions and answering the questions referring

to the word sequence given below

निमननिखित परशनो का अधययि कर और िीच नरदए गए शबद अिकरि क सोरदभव ि परशनो क

उततर रदीनजए

MAT MON DOG HUT DAY

15 If all the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left then

which word is third from the left end

यनरद सभी शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाए तन बाएो

छनर स कौि सा शबद तीसरा हनगा

MON

MAT

HUT

DAY

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

lsquoHUTrsquo word would be the third from the left end

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

lsquoHUTrsquo शबद बाएो छनर स तीसर सथाि पर हनगा

16 If each letter in each of the word is arranged according to the alphabetical series and

then the words are arranged according to the dictionary order from right to left Find out

the third letter of the word which is fourth from the right end

यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक अिर कन रणविािा शरोििा ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और निर

शबदनो कन शबदकनश करि ि रदाएो स बाएो ओर वयरखसथत नकया जाएगा शबद का तीसरा

अिर जञात कर जननक रदाएो छनर स चौथा ह

O

Y

U

T

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans उततर

lsquoUrsquo will be the answer

lsquoUrsquo इसका उततर हनगा

17 If each consonant of each word is changed to its next letter according to the alphabetical

series then how many words contain more than one vowel

रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार यनरद परतयक शबद क परतयक कॉनसनिट कन उसक बाद वाल

अिर ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति शबदनो ि एक स अनिक रॉरि हनोग

Two रदन

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Three तीि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

NAU NOO EOH IUU EAZ

18 Directions In the following question assuming the given statements to be true find

which of the conclusion among given conclusions isare definitely true and then give your

answers accordingly

निमननिखित परश ि नरदए गए कथिनो कन सतय िाित हए पता िगाएो नक नरदए गए निषकरो

ि स कौि सा निषकरव निनित रप स सतय ह और निर उसी क अिसार अपिा उततर

रदीनजए

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R

II N lt R

III U = N

Only I and II are true करि I और II सतय ह

Only I is true करि I सतय ह

Only III is true करि III सतय ह

Only II is true करि II सतय ह

None is true कनई भी सतय िही ो ह

Ans 5

Solution उततर

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Statements कथि

M gt U =lt W lt D R gt G = U O gt= W = N

On combining नििाि करि पर

M gt U =lt W = N R gt G = U =lt W lt D O gt= W lt D

Conclusions निषकरव

I W lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr Relation between W and R canrsquot be

determined)

I W lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W rarr W और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता

II N lt R rarr False (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr Relation between N and R canrsquot be determined)

II N lt R rarr गित (as R gt G = U =lt W = N rarr N और R क बीच सोबोि नििावररत िही ो नकया जा

सकता ह

III U = N rarr False (as U =lt W = N)

III U = N rarr गित (as U =lt W = N)

Hence none of the statements is true

इसनिए कनई भी कथि सतय िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

19 Which of the following expressions will be true if the given expression lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt

Qrsquo is definitely true

यनरद नरदया गया कथि lsquoM lt O gt= P = R =lt Qrsquo निनित रप स सतय ह तन निमननिखित ि स

कौि सा कथि सतय हनगा

M lt P

O gt= Q

R lt O

R = O

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

20 Which of the following would replace and in the following expression so that lsquoQ gt

Wrsquo is definitely true

नरदए गए निमननिखित कथि ि स कौि और का सथाि िगा नजसस lsquoQ gt Wrsquo निनित

रप स सतय हन जाए

T gt= Z = R W A = Z B= Q

gt= gt=

lt gt

gt lt

=lt gt=

gt= gt

Ans

lsquogt= gtrsquo is the answer lsquogt= gtrsquo यह उततर ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Directions (21-25) Study the following information to answer the given questions

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Nine boxes A B C D E F G H and I are placed one above each other Not more than two

boxes are placed below A The number of boxes placed above B is equal to the number of

boxes placed below A Two boxes are placed between A and D Box B is immediate above

box C Two boxes are between C and H and C is above H G is placed above H Two boxes are

between G and F Only one box is placed between D and E I is not placed below E

िौ बकस A B C D E F G H और I एक रदसर क ऊपर रि गए ह A क िीच रदन स

अनिक बकस िही ो रि गए ह B क ऊपर रि गए बॉकसनो की सोखया A क िीच रि गए

बॉकसनो की सोखया क बराबर ह A और D क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह बकसा B C बकस

क ठीक ऊपर रिा हआ ह C और H क बीच रदन बकस रि गए ह और C कन H क

ऊपर रिा गया ह G कन H क ऊपर रिा गया ह G और F क िधय ि रदन बकस ह D

और E क बीच करि एक बकसा रिा गया ह I कन E क िीच िही ो रिा गया ह

Box Name

B

C

I

G

H

D

F

E

A

21 Which of the following box is kept immediate below F

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा F क ठीक िीच ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

A

B

C

E

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ansउततर

E is immediate below F

E F क ठीक िीच ह

22 Four of the following belong to a group which of the following doesnrsquot belong to that

group

निमननिखित ि स चार एक सिह स सोबोनित ह निमननिखित ि स कौि सिह स सोबोनित

िही ो ह

B

C

A

H

F

Ans उततर

C is different among them C उिि स अिग ह

23 Which of the following box is kept immediate above I

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा I क ठीक ऊपर ह

A

G

F

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

D

None of these

Ans

C is kept immediate above I

C को I क ठीक ऊपर रिा गया ह

24 How many box are there between C and D

C और D क िधय ि नकति बकस रि हए ह

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

More than three तीि स अनिक

None कनई िही ो

Ans

Three box are there between C and D

C और D क बीच तीि बकस ह

25 Which of the following box is placed at the top

निमननिखित ि स कौि सा बकसा सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

B

F

C

Either (a) or (b) या (a) या (b)

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Ans

B is placed at the top B कन सबस ऊपर रिा गया ह

26 In a word MODELLING if all letters are arranged in the alphabetical order and then

the vowels are change to the previous letter and the consonant are changed to the next

letter as per the English alphabetical series then how many letters do not repeat more than

once

MODELLING शबद ि यनरद सभी अिरनो कन रणविािा करि ि वयरखसथत नकया जाए और

निर अोगरजी रणविािा शरोििा क अिसार रॉरलस कन उसक पहि राि अिरनो ि बरदि

नरदया जाए और कॉनसनिट कन उसक बारद राि अिरनो ि बरदि नरदया जाए तन नकति

अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

One एक

Five पाोच

Ans

Three letters do not repeat more than once

तीि अिर एक स अनिक बार िही ो रदनहराए जाएो ग|

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Directions (27-29) Study the information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

There are nine members A B C D E F G H and I in a family of three generations There are

only two married couples in the family A is mother of F who is brother in law of G G is the

aunt of C who is the only child of F H is the wife of B who has one son A has only two male

child B is father of I who is the sister of D E is the only sister of G

तीि पीनियनो क एक परररार ि A B C D E F G H और I िौ सरदसय ह इस परररार ि

करि रदन नररानहत जनड ह A F की िाता ह जन G का बररदर-इि-िॉ ह G C की

आोट ह जन F का इकिौता बचचा ह H B की पतनी ह नजसका एक बटा ह A क

करि रदन िडक ह B I का नपता ह जन D की बहि ह E G की इकिौती बहि

ह

27 How is H related with respect to F

F क सोबोि ि H नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Sister in law नससटर-इि-िॉ

Sister बहि

Uncle अोकि

Aunt आोट

Mother िाता

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

Ans

H is the sister-in-law of F

H F की नससटर-इि-िॉ ह

28 How is I related to C

I C स नकस परकार सोबोनित ह

Brother भाई

Son बटा

Sister बहि

Cousin कनजि

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Ans

I is the cousin of C

IC की कनजि ह

29 If the age of E is 35 years than what could be the most possible age of C

यनरद E की आय 35 ररव ह तन C की सोभानरत आय कया हन सकती ह

39 years 39 ररव

40 years 40 ररव

41 years 41 ररव

14 years 14 ररव

30 years 30 ररव

Ans

The most possible age of C is 14 years

C की सबस सोभानरत आय 14 ररव ह

Direction Study the following information carefully and answer the questions given below

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

निमननिखित जािकारी का धयािपरवक अधययि कर नरदए गए परशनो क उततर रदीनजए

Eight businessmen A B C D E F G and H are going to attend a business meeting in a

famous hall of Delhi on different Months viz February May September and November but

not necessarily in the same order In each of the month they will attend the meeting on

dates 9th or 18th Only one businessman will attend the meeting on these given dates

Only one businessman attends the meeting between C and D F will attend the meeting

after E D will attend the meeting in September Four businessmen will attend the meeting

between B and H B will attend the meeting on 18th of any of the given month but before G

There is no one between D and G attending the meeting Two businessmen will attend the

meeting between B and G Two businessmen will attend the meeting between A and C

आठ वयापारी A B C D E F G और H नरदलली क एक परनसदध हॉि ि एक वयापार बठक ि

भाग िि जा रह ह अिग-अिग िाह ि जस नक िरररी िई नसतोबर िरोबर िनकि

जररी िही ो नक इसी करि ि हन परतयक िाह ि र 9 या 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग

िग | रदी गई इि तारीिनो ि करि एक वयखि बठक ि भाग िगा

C और D क बीच करि एक वयापारी बठक ि भाग िता ह E क बारद F बठक ि भाग

िगा D नसतोबर िाह ि बठक ि भाग िगा B और H क बीच चार वयापारी बठक ि भाग

िग B नरदए गए नकसी भी िहीि की 18 तारीि कन बठक ि भाग िगा िनकि G स

पहि बठक ि D और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िि क निए कनई िही ो ह B और G क

बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग A और C क बीच रदन वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

Months Person

February 9th A

18th B

May 9th E

18th C

September 9th G

18th D

November 9th H

18th F

30 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th February

9 िररारी कन निमननिखित ि स कौ बठक ि भाग िगा

F

E

C

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

G

A

Solution उततर

Hence A will attend the meeting on 9th February

इसनिए A 9 िरररी कन बठक ि भाग िगा

31 How many businessmen will attend a meeting between E and G

E और G क बीच नकति िनग बठक ि भाग िग

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

Five पाोच

One एक

Solution उपाय

Hence there is only one businessman who attends the meeting between E and G

इसनिए यहाो करि एक वयखि ह जन E और G क बीच बठक ि भाग िगा

32 Who among the following will attend the meeting on 9th November

निमननिखित ि स कौि 9 िरोबर कन बठक ि भाग िगा

A

B

F

H

C

Solution उततर

Hence H will attend the meeting on 9th November

इसनिए 9 िरोबर कन H बठक ि भाग िगा

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

33 How many businessmen will attend the meeting after F

F क बारद नकति वयापारी बठक ि भाग िग

One एक

Two रदन

Three तीि

Four चार

None कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence no one is there who is attending the meeting after F

इसनिए कनई भी िही ो ह जन F क बारद बठक ि भाग ि रहा ह

34 E attends the meeting on which of the following dates

E निमननिखित ि स नकस नरदि बठक ि भाग िता ह

18th September 18 नसतोबर

9th September 9 नसतोबर

18th May 18 िई

9th May 9 िई

None of these इिि स कनई िही ो

Solution उततर

Hence E attends the meeting on 9th May

इसनिए E ि 9 िई कन बठक ि भाग निया

35 Four of the following five are alike in a certain way and so form a group Which is the

one that does not belong to that group

निमननिखित पाोच ि स चार एक परकार स एक जस ह और इसनिए एक सिह बिात ह

इिि स कौि ह जन उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

EGIK

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह

MOQT

PRTV

HJLN

SUWY

Ans

lsquoMOQTrsquo does not belong to that group

lsquoMOQTrsquo उस सिह स सोबोनित िही ो ह